]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
bfd/ChangeLog
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
343
344Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
345linker:
346
ff5dcc92 347@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 348@include at-file.texi
dff70155 349
252b5132
RH
350@kindex -a@var{keyword}
351@item -a@var{keyword}
352This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
353argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
354@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
355@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
356to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
357
358@ifset I960
359@cindex architectures
360@kindex -A@var{arch}
361@item -A@var{architecture}
362@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
363@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
364In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
365Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
366@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
367the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 368archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
369family}, for details.
370
ff5dcc92 371Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
372other architecture families.
373@end ifset
374
375@ifclear SingleFormat
376@cindex binary input format
377@kindex -b @var{format}
378@kindex --format=@var{format}
379@cindex input format
380@cindex input format
381@item -b @var{input-format}
382@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
383@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
384file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 385@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 386that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 387configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 388to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
389default input format the most usual format on each machine.
390@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
391supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
392formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
393@xref{BFD}.
394
395You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
396binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
397linking object files of different formats), by including
398@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 399particular format.
252b5132
RH
400
401The default format is taken from the environment variable
402@code{GNUTARGET}.
403@ifset UsesEnvVars
404@xref{Environment}.
405@end ifset
406You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
407@code{TARGET};
408@ifclear man
409see @ref{Format Commands}.
410@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
411@end ifclear
412
413@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
415@cindex compatibility, MRI
416@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
417@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 418For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 419files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
420@ifclear man
421@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
422@end ifclear
423@ifset man
424the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
425@end ifset
426Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 427the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
428scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
429If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
430specified by any @samp{-L} options.
431
432@cindex common allocation
433@kindex -d
434@kindex -dc
435@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 436@item -d
252b5132
RH
437@itemx -dc
438@itemx -dp
439These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
440compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
441even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
442script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
443@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
444
445@cindex entry point, from command line
446@kindex -e @var{entry}
447@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 448@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
449@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
450Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
451program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
452named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
453and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
454base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
455@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
456and other ways of specifying the entry point.
457
b58f81ae
DJ
458@kindex --exclude-libs
459@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
460Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 461exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
462@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
463automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
464port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
465explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
466option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
467be treated as hidden.
468
e1c37eb5
DK
469@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
470@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
471Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
472should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
473into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
474may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
475used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
476the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
477match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
478command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
479of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
480regardless of this option.
481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex dynamic symbol table
483@kindex -E
484@kindex --export-dynamic
485@item -E
486@itemx --export-dynamic
487When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
488dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
489which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
490
491If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
492contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
493mentioned in the link.
494
495If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
496back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
497dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
498linking the program itself.
499
55255dae 500You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 501be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 502See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 503
36f63dca 504@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
505@cindex big-endian objects
506@cindex endianness
507@kindex -EB
508@item -EB
509Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
510
511@cindex little-endian objects
512@kindex -EL
513@item -EL
514Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 515@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
516
517@kindex -f
518@kindex --auxiliary
519@item -f
520@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
521When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
522to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
523table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
524symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
525
526If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
527run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
528the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
529first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
530@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
531in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
532Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
533implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
534machine specific performance.
535
536This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
537will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
538
539@kindex -F
540@kindex --filter
541@item -F @var{name}
542@itemx --filter @var{name}
543When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
544the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
545of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
546on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
547
548If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
549run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
550dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
551filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
552found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
553used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
554@var{name}.
555
ff5dcc92 556Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 557toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
558object files.
559@ifclear SingleFormat
560The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 561@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 562@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
563environment variable.
564@end ifclear
565The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
566creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 567
3dbf70a2
MM
568@cindex finalization function
569@kindex -fini
570@item -fini @var{name}
571When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
572executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
573address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
574the function to call.
575
252b5132
RH
576@kindex -g
577@item -g
578Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
579
580@kindex -G
581@kindex --gpsize
582@cindex object size
583@item -G@var{value}
584@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
585Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
586@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
587MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
588sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
589
590@cindex runtime library name
591@kindex -h@var{name}
592@kindex -soname=@var{name}
593@item -h@var{name}
594@itemx -soname=@var{name}
595When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
596the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
597which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
598linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
599field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
600
601@kindex -i
602@cindex incremental link
603@item -i
604Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
605
3dbf70a2
MM
606@cindex initialization function
607@kindex -init
608@item -init @var{name}
609When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
610executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
611of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
612function to call.
613
252b5132 614@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
615@kindex -l@var{namespec}
616@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
617@item -l@var{namespec}
618@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
619Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
620list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
621If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
622will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
623will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 624
ff5dcc92 625On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
626files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
627and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
628called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
629@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
630indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
631to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
632@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
633
634The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
635specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
636was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
637command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
638archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
639the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
640
ff5dcc92 641See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
642archives multiple times.
643
644You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
645
646@ifset GENERIC
647This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 648if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
649behaviour of the AIX linker.
650@end ifset
651
652@cindex search directory, from cmd line
653@kindex -L@var{dir}
654@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 655@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 656@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
657Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
658for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
659option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
660in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
661on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 662@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
663order in which the options appear.
664
9c8ebd6a
DJ
665If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
666by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
667
252b5132
RH
668@ifset UsesEnvVars
669The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 670@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
671some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
672@end ifset
673
674The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
675@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
676at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
677
678@cindex emulation
679@kindex -m @var{emulation}
680@item -m@var{emulation}
681Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
682emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
683
684If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
685@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
686
687Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
688configured.
689
690@cindex link map
691@kindex -M
692@kindex --print-map
693@item -M
694@itemx --print-map
695Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
696information about the link, including the following:
697
698@itemize @bullet
699@item
3b83e13a 700Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
701@item
702How common symbols are allocated.
703@item
704All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
705which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
706@item
707The values assigned to symbols.
708
709Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
710involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
711have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
712linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
713of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
714the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
715linker script containing:
716
717@smallexample
718 foo = 1
719 foo = foo * 4
720 foo = foo + 8
721@end smallexample
722
723will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
724option is used:
725
726@smallexample
727 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
728 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
729 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
730@end smallexample
731
732See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
733scripts.
252b5132
RH
734@end itemize
735
736@kindex -n
737@cindex read-only text
738@cindex NMAGIC
739@kindex --nmagic
740@item -n
741@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 742Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 743@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
744
745@kindex -N
746@kindex --omagic
747@cindex read/write from cmd line
748@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 749@item -N
252b5132
RH
750@itemx --omagic
751Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
752not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
753libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
754mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
755is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
756specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
757
758@kindex --no-omagic
759@cindex OMAGIC
760@item --no-omagic
761This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
762sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
763be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
764shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
765
766@kindex -o @var{output}
767@kindex --output=@var{output}
768@cindex naming the output file
769@item -o @var{output}
770@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 771Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
772option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
773script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
774
775@kindex -O @var{level}
776@cindex generating optimized output
777@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 778If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 779the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
780should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
781option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
782the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
783no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
784of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 785
a712da20
NC
786@kindex -q
787@kindex --emit-relocs
788@cindex retain relocations in final executable
789@item -q
790@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 791Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
792Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
793order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
794in larger executables.
795
dbab7a7b
NC
796This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
797
4f471f39
RS
798@kindex --force-dynamic
799@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
800@item --force-dynamic
801Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
802to VxWorks targets.
803
252b5132
RH
804@cindex partial link
805@cindex relocatable output
806@kindex -r
1049f94e 807@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 808@item -r
1049f94e 809@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 810Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 811turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
812linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
813magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
814@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 815@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
816If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
817linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
818constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
819
62bf86b4
HPN
820When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
821partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
822relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
823example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
824with input files in other formats at all.
825
252b5132
RH
826This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
827
828@kindex -R @var{file}
829@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
830@cindex symbol-only input
831@item -R @var{filename}
832@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
833Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
834relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
835to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
836programs. You may use this option more than once.
837
ff5dcc92 838For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 839followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 840the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
841
842@kindex -s
843@kindex --strip-all
844@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 845@item -s
252b5132
RH
846@itemx --strip-all
847Omit all symbol information from the output file.
848
849@kindex -S
850@kindex --strip-debug
851@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 852@item -S
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --strip-debug
854Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
855
856@kindex -t
857@kindex --trace
858@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 859@item -t
252b5132 860@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 861Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
862
863@kindex -T @var{script}
864@kindex --script=@var{script}
865@cindex script files
866@item -T @var{scriptfile}
867@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
868Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 869@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 870@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
871output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
872the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
873specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
874options accumulate.
252b5132 875
14be8564
L
876@kindex -dT @var{script}
877@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
878@cindex script files
879@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
880@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
881Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
882
883This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
884processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
885command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
886@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
887behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
888command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
889the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
890@samp{gcc}).
891
252b5132
RH
892@kindex -u @var{symbol}
893@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
894@cindex undefined symbol
895@item -u @var{symbol}
896@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
897Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
898symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
899modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
900different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
901option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
902
903@kindex -Ur
904@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 905@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
906For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
907@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 908turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
909@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
910It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
911with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
912be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
913@samp{-r} for the others.
914
577a0623
AM
915@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
916@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
917Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
918@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
919missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
920specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
921multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
922input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
923in a linker script.
a854a4a7 924
252b5132
RH
925@kindex -v
926@kindex -V
927@kindex --version
928@cindex version
929@item -v
930@itemx --version
931@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 932Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
933lists the supported emulations.
934
935@kindex -x
936@kindex --discard-all
937@cindex deleting local symbols
938@item -x
939@itemx --discard-all
940Delete all local symbols.
941
942@kindex -X
943@kindex --discard-locals
944@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 945@item -X
252b5132 946@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
947Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
948system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
949or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
950
951@kindex -y @var{symbol}
952@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
953@cindex symbol tracing
954@item -y @var{symbol}
955@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
956Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
957option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
958to prepend an underscore.
959
960This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
961don't know where the reference is coming from.
962
963@kindex -Y @var{path}
964@item -Y @var{path}
965Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
966for Solaris compatibility.
967
968@kindex -z @var{keyword}
969@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
970The recognized keywords are:
971@table @samp
972
973@item combreloc
974Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
975lookup caching possible.
976
977@item defs
560e09e9 978Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 979shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 980
6aa29e7b
JJ
981@item execstack
982Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
983
cd6d6c15
NC
984@item initfirst
985This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
986It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
987before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
988the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
989the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
990objects.
991
992@item interpose
993Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
994but the primary executable.
995
5fa222e4
AM
996@item lazy
997When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
998dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
999the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1000Lazy binding is the default.
1001
cd6d6c15
NC
1002@item loadfltr
1003Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1004runtime.
1005
1006@item muldefs
1007Allows multiple definitions.
1008
1009@item nocombreloc
1010Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1011
1012@item nocopyreloc
1013Disables production of copy relocs.
1014
1015@item nodefaultlib
1016Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1017ignore any default library search paths.
1018
1019@item nodelete
1020Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1021
1022@item nodlopen
1023Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1024
1025@item nodump
1026Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1027
6aa29e7b
JJ
1028@item noexecstack
1029Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1030
1031@item norelro
1032Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1033
cd6d6c15
NC
1034@item now
1035When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1036dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1037when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1038deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1039first called.
1040
1041@item origin
1042Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1043
6aa29e7b
JJ
1044@item relro
1045Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1046
24718e3b
L
1047@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1048Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1049
1050@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1051Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1052
cd6d6c15
NC
1053@end table
1054
ece2d90e 1055Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1056
1057@kindex -(
1058@cindex groups of archives
1059@item -( @var{archives} -)
1060@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1061The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1062either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1063
1064The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1065references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1066the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1067archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1068object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1069would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1070they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1071resolved.
1072
1073Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1074it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1075more archives.
1076
69da35b5
NC
1077@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1078@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1079@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1080@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1081Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1082recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1083and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1084the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1085behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1086so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1087restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1088
4a43e768
AM
1089@kindex --as-needed
1090@kindex --no-as-needed
1091@item --as-needed
1092@itemx --no-as-needed
1093This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1094on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1095the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1096on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1097needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1098for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1099which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1100the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1101linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1102@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1103
e56f61be
L
1104@kindex --add-needed
1105@kindex --no-add-needed
1106@item --add-needed
1107@itemx --no-add-needed
1108This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1109DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1110the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1111a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1112@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1113for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1114the default behaviour.
1115
252b5132
RH
1116@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1117@item -assert @var{keyword}
1118This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1119
1120@kindex -Bdynamic
1121@kindex -dy
1122@kindex -call_shared
1123@item -Bdynamic
1124@itemx -dy
1125@itemx -call_shared
1126Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1127for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1128default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1129for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1130multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1131@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1132
a1ab1d2a
UD
1133@kindex -Bgroup
1134@item -Bgroup
1135Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1136section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1137object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1138@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1139only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1140
252b5132
RH
1141@kindex -Bstatic
1142@kindex -dn
1143@kindex -non_shared
1144@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1145@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1146@itemx -dn
1147@itemx -non_shared
1148@itemx -static
1149Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1150platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1151variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1152may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1153library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1154option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1155option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1156shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1157references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1158libraries.
252b5132
RH
1159
1160@kindex -Bsymbolic
1161@item -Bsymbolic
1162When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1163definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1164for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1165within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1166platforms which support shared libraries.
1167
40b36307
L
1168@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1169@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1170When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1171symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1172This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1173libraries.
1174
55255dae
L
1175@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1176@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1177Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1178typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1179global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1180within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1181to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1182in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1183which support shared libraries.
1184
1185The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1186scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1187
40b36307
L
1188@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1189@item --dynamic-list-data
1190Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1191
1192@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1193@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1194Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1195is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1196
0b8a70d9
L
1197@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1198@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1199Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1200
252b5132
RH
1201@kindex --check-sections
1202@kindex --no-check-sections
1203@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1204@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1205Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1206been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1207perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1208suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1209allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1210restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1211Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1212force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1213option.
252b5132
RH
1214
1215@cindex cross reference table
1216@kindex --cref
1217@item --cref
1218Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1219generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1220Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1221
1222The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1223easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1224sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1225symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1226definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1227
4818e05f
AM
1228@cindex common allocation
1229@kindex --no-define-common
1230@item --no-define-common
1231This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1232The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1233@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1234
1235The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1236the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1237of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1238forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1239Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1240from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1241This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1242and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1243duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1244paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1245
252b5132
RH
1246@cindex symbols, from command line
1247@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1248@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1249Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1250address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1251times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1252limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1253context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1254symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1255constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1256using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1257Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1258space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1259@var{expression}.
1260
1261@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1262@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1263@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1264@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1265@itemx --no-demangle
1266These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1267and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1268present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1269underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1270mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1271different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1272to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1273demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1274is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1275
1276@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1277@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1278@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1279@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1280Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1281generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1282linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1283doing.
1284
7ce691ae 1285@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1286@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1287@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1288@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1289Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1290with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1291
252b5132
RH
1292@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1293@item --force-exe-suffix
1294Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1295
1296If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1297@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1298the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1299option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1300Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1301it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1302
1303@kindex --gc-sections
1304@kindex --no-gc-sections
1305@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1306@item --gc-sections
1307@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1308Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1309targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1310performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1311@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1312
d5465ba2
AM
1313@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1314examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1315symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1316command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1317referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1318libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1319referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1320the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1321relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1322
ac69cbc6
TG
1323This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1324@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1325specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1326a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1327
c17d87de
NC
1328@kindex --print-gc-sections
1329@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1330@cindex garbage collection
1331@item --print-gc-sections
1332@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1333List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1334printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1335collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1336default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1337be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1338line.
1339
252b5132
RH
1340@cindex help
1341@cindex usage
1342@kindex --help
1343@item --help
1344Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1345
ea20a7da
CC
1346@kindex --target-help
1347@item --target-help
1348Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@kindex -Map
1351@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1352Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1353@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1354
1355@cindex memory usage
1356@kindex --no-keep-memory
1357@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1358@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1359symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1360instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1361necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1362while linking a large executable.
1363
1364@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1365@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1366@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1367@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1368Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1369is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1370The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1371behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1372libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1373
aa713662
L
1374@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1375@kindex -z muldefs
1376@item --allow-multiple-definition
1377@itemx -z muldefs
1378Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1379report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1380first definition will be used.
1381
b79e8c78 1382@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1383@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1384@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1385@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1386Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1387This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1388determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1389shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1390how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1391
903249d7
NC
1392The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1393referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1394an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1395a shared library.
1396
1397The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1398libraries specified at link time are that:
1399
1400@itemize @bullet
1401@item
1402A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1403that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1404resolvable at load time.
1405@item
1406There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1407symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1408
1409The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1410select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1411architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1412appropriate memset function.
1413@end itemize
b79e8c78 1414
31941635
L
1415@kindex --no-undefined-version
1416@item --no-undefined-version
1417Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1418it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1419will be issued instead.
1420
3e3b46e5
PB
1421@kindex --default-symver
1422@item --default-symver
1423Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1424exported symbols.
1425
1426@kindex --default-imported-symver
1427@item --default-imported-symver
1428Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1429imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1430
252b5132
RH
1431@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1432@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1433Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1434files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1435been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1436This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1437errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1438have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1439inappropriate.
1440
fe7929ce
AM
1441@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1442@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1443Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1444library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1445
252b5132
RH
1446@kindex --no-whole-archive
1447@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1448Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1449archive files.
1450
1451@cindex output file after errors
1452@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1453@item --noinhibit-exec
1454Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1455Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1456errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1457when it issues any error whatsoever.
1458
0a9c1c8e
CD
1459@kindex -nostdlib
1460@item -nostdlib
1461Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1462command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1463(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1464
252b5132
RH
1465@ifclear SingleFormat
1466@kindex --oformat
1467@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1468@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1469file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1470@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1471object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1472object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1473should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1474usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1475name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1476list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1477command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1478this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1479@end ifclear
1480
36af4a4e
JJ
1481@kindex -pie
1482@kindex --pic-executable
1483@item -pie
1484@itemx --pic-executable
1485@cindex position independent executables
1486Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1487ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1488libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1489address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1490normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1491defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1492
252b5132
RH
1493@kindex -qmagic
1494@item -qmagic
1495This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1496
1497@kindex -Qy
1498@item -Qy
1499This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1500
1501@kindex --relax
1502@cindex synthesizing linker
1503@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1504@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1505An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1506@ifset GENERIC
1507This option is only supported on a few targets.
1508@end ifset
1509@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1510@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1511@end ifset
1512@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1513@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1514@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1515@ifset XTENSA
1516@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1517@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1518@ifset M68HC11
1519@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1520@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1521@ifset POWERPC
1522@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1523@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1524
1525On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1526optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1527in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1528instructions in the output object file.
1529
1530On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1531debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1532@ifset GENERIC
1533This is known to be
1534the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1535@end ifset
1536
1537@ifset GENERIC
1538On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1539but ignored.
1540@end ifset
1541
1542@cindex retaining specified symbols
1543@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1544@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1545@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1546Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1547discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1548symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1549@ifset GENERIC
1550(such as VxWorks)
1551@end ifset
1552where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1553run-time memory.
1554
1555@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1556or symbols needed for relocations.
1557
1558You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1559line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1560
1561@ifset GENERIC
1562@item -rpath @var{dir}
1563@cindex runtime library search path
1564@kindex -rpath
1565Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1566linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1567arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1568them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1569also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1570objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1571@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1572ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1573@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1574
ff5dcc92 1575The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1576SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1577@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1578runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1579options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1580gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1581file systems.
252b5132 1582
ff5dcc92 1583For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1584followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1585the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1586@end ifset
1587
1588@ifset GENERIC
1589@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1590@kindex -rpath-link
1591@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1592When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1593happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1594of the input files.
1595
1596When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1597non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1598shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1599explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1600specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1601@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1602either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1603appearing multiple times.
1604
28c309a2
NC
1605This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1606that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1607is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1608runtime linker would do.
1609
252b5132 1610The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1611libraries:
252b5132
RH
1612@enumerate
1613@item
ff5dcc92 1614Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1615@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1616Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1617between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1618specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1619used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1620at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1621by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1622the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1623@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1624On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1625@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1626environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1627@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1628On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1629directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1630@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1631For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1632variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1633@item
ec4eb78a
L
1634For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1635@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1636libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1637@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1638@item
252b5132
RH
1639The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1640@item
1641For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1642exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1643@end enumerate
1644
1645If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1646warning and continue with the link.
1647@end ifset
1648
1649@kindex -shared
1650@kindex -Bshareable
1651@item -shared
1652@itemx -Bshareable
1653@cindex shared libraries
1654Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1655and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1656shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1657undefined symbols in the link.
1658
de7dd2bd 1659@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1660@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1661This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1662ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1663sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1664eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1665between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1666specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1667
bcaa7b3e
L
1668@kindex --sort-section name
1669@item --sort-section name
1670This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1671patterns in the linker script.
1672
1673@kindex --sort-section alignment
1674@item --sort-section alignment
1675This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1676patterns in the linker script.
1677
252b5132 1678@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1679@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1680Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1681each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1682size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1683
1684@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1685@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1686Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1687output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1688This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1689certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1690cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1691that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1692support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1693input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1694more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1695many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1696
1697@kindex --stats
1698@item --stats
1699Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1700as execution time and memory usage.
1701
e2243057
RS
1702@kindex --sysroot
1703@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1704Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1705configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1706that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1707
252b5132
RH
1708@kindex --traditional-format
1709@cindex traditional format
1710@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1711For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1712the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1713use the traditional format instead.
1714
1715@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1716For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1717symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1718full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1719@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1720trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1721combine duplicate entries.
1722
176355da
NC
1723@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1724@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1725Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1726address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1727times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1728line.
1729@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1730for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1731@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1732should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1733sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1734
252b5132
RH
1735@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1736@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1737@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1738@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1739@item -Tbss @var{org}
1740@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1741@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1742Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1743@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1744
258795f5
L
1745@kindex -Ttext-segment @var{org}
1746@itemx -Ttext-segment @var{org}
1747@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1748When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1749of the first byte of the text segment.
1750
560e09e9
NC
1751@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1752@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1753Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1754values for @samp{method}:
1755
1756@table @samp
1757@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1758Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1759
1760@item report-all
da8bce14 1761Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1762
1763@item ignore-in-object-files
1764Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1765ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1766
1767@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1768Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1769ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1770when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1771libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1772command line.
1773@end table
1774
1775The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1776by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1777
1778Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1779unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1780can change this to a warning.
1781
252b5132
RH
1782@kindex --verbose
1783@cindex verbose
1784@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1785@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1786Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1787supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1788the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1789
1790@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1791@cindex version script, symbol versions
1792@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1793Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1794used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1795about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1796is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1797@xref{VERSION}.
1798
7ce691ae 1799@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1800@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1801@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1802@item --warn-common
1803Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1804a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1805but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1806you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1807Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1808warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1809
1810There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1811
1812@table @samp
1813@item int i = 1;
1814A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1815file.
1816
1817@item extern int i;
1818An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1819There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1820variable somewhere.
1821
1822@item int i;
1823A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1824variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1825The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1826single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1827size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1828a definition of the same variable.
1829@end table
1830
1831The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1832Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1833just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1834encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1835a common symbol.
1836
1837@enumerate
1838@item
1839Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1840definition for the symbol.
1841@smallexample
1842@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1843 overridden by definition
1844@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1845@end smallexample
1846
1847@item
1848Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1849the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1850except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1851@smallexample
1852@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1853 overriding common
1854@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1855@end smallexample
1856
1857@item
1858Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1859@smallexample
1860@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1861 of `@var{symbol}'
1862@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1863@end smallexample
1864
1865@item
1866Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1867@smallexample
1868@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1869 overridden by larger common
1870@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1871@end smallexample
1872
1873@item
1874Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1875the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1876encountered in a different order.
1877@smallexample
1878@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1879 overriding smaller common
1880@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1881@end smallexample
1882@end enumerate
1883
1884@kindex --warn-constructors
1885@item --warn-constructors
1886Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1887object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1888detect the use of global constructors.
1889
1890@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1891@item --warn-multiple-gp
1892Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1893This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1894Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1895section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1896of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1897base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1898base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1899bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1900large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1901values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1902option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1903
1904@kindex --warn-once
1905@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1906@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1907@item --warn-once
1908Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1909which refers to it.
1910
1911@kindex --warn-section-align
1912@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1913@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1914@item --warn-section-align
1915Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1916alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1917The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1918is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1919the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1920
8fdd7217
NC
1921@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1922@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1923Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1924
560e09e9
NC
1925@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1926@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1927If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1928@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1929This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1930
1931@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1932@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1933This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1934it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1935
252b5132
RH
1936@kindex --whole-archive
1937@cindex including an entire archive
1938@item --whole-archive
1939For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1940@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1941in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1942files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1943library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1944library. This option may be used more than once.
1945
7ec229ce 1946Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1947about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1948Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1949list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1950your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1951
252b5132
RH
1952@kindex --wrap
1953@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1954Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1955@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1956undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1957@var{symbol}.
1958
1959This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1960wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1961wishes to call the system function, it should call
1962@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1963
1964Here is a trivial example:
1965
1966@smallexample
1967void *
cc2f008e 1968__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1969@{
cc2f008e 1970 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1971 return __real_malloc (c);
1972@}
1973@end smallexample
1974
ff5dcc92 1975If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1976all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1977instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1978call the real @code{malloc} function.
1979
1980You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1981links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1982you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1983file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1984call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1985
6aa29e7b
JJ
1986@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1987@item --eh-frame-hdr
1988Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1989@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1990
6c1439be
L
1991@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1992@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1993@item --enable-new-dtags
1994@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1995This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1996systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1997@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1998If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1999created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2000those options are only available for ELF systems.
2001
2d643429 2002@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2003@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2004Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2005close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2006time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2007increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2008value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2009
fdc90cb4
JJ
2010@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2011@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2012Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2013@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2014new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2015the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2016hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2017
35835446
JR
2018@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2019@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2020This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2021linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2022for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2023about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2024
4f9c04f7 2025Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20261021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2027run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2028has been used.
2029
2030The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2031enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2032
c0065db7
RM
2033@kindex --build-id
2034@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2035@item --build-id
2036@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2037Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2038The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2039file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2040@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2041parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2042@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2043@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2044an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2045characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2046omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2047
2048The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2049that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2050unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2051to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2052file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2053string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2054
2055Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2056@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2057@end table
2058
0285c67d
NC
2059@c man end
2060
36f63dca 2061@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2062
0285c67d
NC
2063@c man begin OPTIONS
2064
ff5dcc92 2065The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2066the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2067normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2068use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2069@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2070like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2071symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2072object file).
2073
2074In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2075support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2076PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2077values by either a space or an equals sign.
2078
ff5dcc92 2079@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2080
2081@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2082@item --add-stdcall-alias
2083If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2084as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2085[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2086
2087@kindex --base-file
2088@item --base-file @var{file}
2089Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2090addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2091@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2092[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --dll
2095@item --dll
2096Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2097@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2098file.
bb10df36 2099[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2100
88183869
DK
2101@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2102@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2103@item --enable-long-section-names
2104@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2105The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2106the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2107for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2108fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2109to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2110allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2111disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2112generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2113as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2114with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers.
2115[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2116
252b5132
RH
2117@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2118@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2119@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2120@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2121If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2122do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2123only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2124resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2125undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2126@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2127to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2128warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2129import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2130to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2131feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2132@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2133mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2134[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2135
2136@cindex DLLs, creating
2137@kindex --export-all-symbols
2138@item --export-all-symbols
2139If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2140be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2141otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2142explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2143attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2144option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2145@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2146@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2147exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2148re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2149such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2150@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2151@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2152Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2153not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2154extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2155(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2156These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2157@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2158@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2159@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2160@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2161[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2162
2163@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2164@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2165Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2166exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2167[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2168
2169@kindex --file-alignment
2170@item --file-alignment
2171Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2172file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2173512.
bb10df36 2174[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2175
2176@cindex heap size
2177@kindex --heap
2178@item --heap @var{reserve}
2179@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2180Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2181to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2182committed.
bb10df36 2183[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2184
2185@cindex image base
2186@kindex --image-base
2187@item --image-base @var{value}
2188Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2189the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2190is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2191your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2192other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2193for dlls.
bb10df36 2194[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2195
2196@kindex --kill-at
2197@item --kill-at
2198If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2199symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2200[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2201
26d2d8a2
BF
2202@kindex --large-address-aware
2203@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2204If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2205header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2206greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2207or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2208section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2209[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2210
252b5132
RH
2211@kindex --major-image-version
2212@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2213Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2214[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2215
2216@kindex --major-os-version
2217@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2218Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2220
2221@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2222@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2223Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2224[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2225
2226@kindex --minor-image-version
2227@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2228Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2229[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2230
2231@kindex --minor-os-version
2232@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2233Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2234[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2235
2236@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2237@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2238Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2239[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2240
2241@cindex DEF files, creating
2242@cindex DLLs, creating
2243@kindex --output-def
2244@item --output-def @var{file}
2245The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2246file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2247(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2248library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2249automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2250[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2251
b044cda1
CW
2252@cindex DLLs, creating
2253@kindex --out-implib
2254@item --out-implib @var{file}
2255The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2256import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2257import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2258may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2259makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2260creation step.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2262
2263@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2264@item --enable-auto-image-base
2265Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2266using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2267from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2268collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2269avoided.
bb10df36 2270[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2271
2272@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2273@item --disable-auto-image-base
2274Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2275user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2276default.
bb10df36 2277[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2278
2279@cindex DLLs, linking to
2280@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2281@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2282When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2283search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2284@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2285between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2286uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2287@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2288[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2289
2290@kindex --enable-auto-import
2291@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2292Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2293DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2294building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2295'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2296to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2297specification published by Microsoft.
2298
e2a83dd0
NC
2299Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2300data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2301placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2302around a problem with consts that is described here:
2303http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2304
4d8907ac
DS
2305Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2306see this message:
0d888aac 2307
ece2d90e 2308"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2309documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2310
ece2d90e
NC
2311This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2312ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2313allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2314fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2315constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2316multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2317this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2318of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2319the warning, and exit.
2320
2321There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2322data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2323
2fa9fc65
NC
2324One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2325of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2326this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2327
c0065db7
RM
2328A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2329that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2330there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2331a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2332
2333@example
2334extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2335extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2336 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2337@end example
2338
2339or
2340
2341@example
2342extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2343extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2344 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2345@end example
2346
c0065db7 2347For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2348is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2349
2350@example
2351extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2352extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2353 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2354@end example
2355
c406afaf
NC
2356or
2357
2358@example
2359extern long long extern_ll;
2360extern_ll -->
2361 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2362@end example
2363
2fa9fc65 2364A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2365'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2366@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2367requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2368building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2369merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2370between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2371constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2372
2373Original:
2374@example
2375--foo.h
2376extern int arr[];
2377--foo.c
2378#include "foo.h"
2379void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2380 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2381@}
2382@end example
2383
2384Solution 1:
2385@example
2386--foo.h
2387extern int arr[];
2388--foo.c
2389#include "foo.h"
2390void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2391 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2392 volatile int *parr = arr;
2393 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2394@}
2395@end example
2396
2397Solution 2:
2398@example
2399--foo.h
2400/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2401#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2402 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2403#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2404#else
2405#define FOO_IMPORT
2406#endif
2407extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2408--foo.c
2409#include "foo.h"
2410void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2411 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2412@}
2413@end example
2414
c0065db7 2415A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2416library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2417for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2418functions).
bb10df36 2419[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2420
2421@kindex --disable-auto-import
2422@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2423Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2424@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2425[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2426
2fa9fc65
NC
2427@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2428@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2429If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2430that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2431a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2432environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2433[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2434
2435@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2436@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2437Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2438DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2439[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2440
b044cda1
CW
2441@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2442@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2443Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2444[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2445
252b5132
RH
2446@kindex --section-alignment
2447@item --section-alignment
2448Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2449addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2450[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2451
2452@cindex stack size
2453@kindex --stack
2454@item --stack @var{reserve}
2455@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2456Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2457to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2458committed.
bb10df36 2459[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2460
2461@kindex --subsystem
2462@item --subsystem @var{which}
2463@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2464@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2465Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2466legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2467@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2468the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2469@var{which}.
bb10df36 2470[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2471
2472@end table
2473
0285c67d
NC
2474@c man end
2475
93fd0973
SC
2476@ifset M68HC11
2477@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2478
2479@c man begin OPTIONS
2480
2481The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2482memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2483
2484@table @gcctabopt
2485
2486@kindex --no-trampoline
2487@item --no-trampoline
2488This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2489is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2490instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2491
2492@kindex --bank-window
2493@item --bank-window @var{name}
2494This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2495the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2496The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2497paging and addresses within the memory window.
2498
2499@end table
2500
2501@c man end
2502@end ifset
2503
7fb9f789
NC
2504@ifset M68K
2505@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2506
2507@c man begin OPTIONS
2508
2509The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2510when linking for 68K targets.
2511
2512@table @gcctabopt
2513
2514@kindex --got
2515@item --got=@var{type}
2516This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2517@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2518@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2519Info entry for @file{ld}.
2520
2521@end table
2522
2523@c man end
2524@end ifset
2525
252b5132
RH
2526@ifset UsesEnvVars
2527@node Environment
2528@section Environment Variables
2529
0285c67d
NC
2530@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2531
560e09e9 2532You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2533@ifclear SingleFormat
2534@code{GNUTARGET},
2535@end ifclear
2536@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2537
36f63dca 2538@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2539@kindex GNUTARGET
2540@cindex default input format
2541@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2542use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2543of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2544@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2545of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2546attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2547this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2548there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2549object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2550BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2551in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2552@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2553
2554@kindex LDEMULATION
2555@cindex default emulation
2556@cindex emulation, default
2557@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2558@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2559behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2560available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2561the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2562variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2563linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2564
2565@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2566@cindex demangling, default
2567Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2568@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2569default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2570a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2571may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2572options.
2573
0285c67d
NC
2574@c man end
2575@end ifset
2576
252b5132
RH
2577@node Scripts
2578@chapter Linker Scripts
2579
2580@cindex scripts
2581@cindex linker scripts
2582@cindex command files
2583Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2584written in the linker command language.
2585
2586The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2587the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2588the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2589more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2590direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2591described below.
2592
2593The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2594yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2595linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2596to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2597such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2598
2599You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2600line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2601default linker script.
2602
2603You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2604to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2605Linker Scripts}.
2606
2607@menu
2608* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2609* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2610* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2611* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2612* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2613* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2614* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2615* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2616* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2617* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2618* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2619@end menu
2620
2621@node Basic Script Concepts
2622@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2623@cindex linker script concepts
2624We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2625describe the linker script language.
2626
2627The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2628file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2629@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2630The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2631purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2632among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2633section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2634in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2635
2636Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2637also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2638contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2639the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2640A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2641area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2642loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2643which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2644of debugging information.
2645
2646Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2647first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2648the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2649@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2650section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2651same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2652is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2653(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2654based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2655RAM address would be the VMA.
2656
2657You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2658program with the @samp{-h} option.
2659
2660Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2661@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2662has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2663information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2664will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2665static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2666referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2667
2668You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2669program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2670option.
2671
2672@node Script Format
2673@section Linker Script Format
2674@cindex linker script format
2675Linker scripts are text files.
2676
2677You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2678either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2679symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2680generally ignored.
2681
2682Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2683If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2684otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2685double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2686file name.
2687
2688You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2689@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2690to whitespace.
2691
2692@node Simple Example
2693@section Simple Linker Script Example
2694@cindex linker script example
2695@cindex example of linker script
2696Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2697
2698The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2699@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2700memory layout of the output file.
2701
2702The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2703describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2704code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2705@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2706Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2707your input files.
2708
2709For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27100x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2711linker script which will do that:
2712@smallexample
2713SECTIONS
2714@{
2715 . = 0x10000;
2716 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2717 . = 0x8000000;
2718 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2719 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2720@}
2721@end smallexample
2722
2723You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2724followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2725descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2726
252b5132
RH
2727The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2728sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2729counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2730other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2731current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2732incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2733@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2734
2735The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2736required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2737after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2738which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2739wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2740means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2741
2742Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2743@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2744@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2745
2746The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2747the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2748at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2749output section, the value of the location counter will be
2750@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2751effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2752immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2753
2754The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2755alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2756example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2757sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2758may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2759sections.
2760
2761That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2762
2763@node Simple Commands
2764@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2765@cindex linker script simple commands
2766In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2767
2768@menu
2769* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2770* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2771@ifclear SingleFormat
2772* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2773@end ifclear
2774
2775* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2776@end menu
2777
2778@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2779@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2780@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2781@cindex start of execution
2782@cindex first instruction
2783@cindex entry point
2784The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2785point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2786entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2787@smallexample
2788ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2789@end smallexample
2790
2791There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2792entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2793stopping when one of them succeeds:
2794@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2795@item
252b5132 2796the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2797@item
252b5132 2798the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2799@item
252b5132 2800the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2801@item
252b5132 2802the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2803@item
252b5132
RH
2804The address @code{0}.
2805@end itemize
2806
2807@node File Commands
36f63dca 2808@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2809@cindex linker script file commands
2810Several linker script commands deal with files.
2811
2812@table @code
2813@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2814@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2815@cindex including a linker script
2816Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2817be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2818with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
281910 levels deep.
2820
4006703d
NS
2821You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2822@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2823
252b5132
RH
2824@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2825@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2826@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2827@cindex input files in linker scripts
2828@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2829@cindex linker script input object files
2830The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2831in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2832
2833For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2834a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2835then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2836
2837In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2838script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2839
e3f2db7f
AO
2840In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2841with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2842located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2843for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2844open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2845linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2846description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2847
ff5dcc92 2848If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2849name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2850@samp{-l}.
2851
2852When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2853files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2854script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2855
2856@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2857@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2858@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2859@cindex grouping input files
2860The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2861files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2862new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2863in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2864
b717d30e
JJ
2865@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2866@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2867@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2868This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2869commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2870as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2871with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2872when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2873@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2874and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2875setting afterwards.
2876
252b5132
RH
2877@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2878@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2879@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2880The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2881@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2882@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2883Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2884precedence.
2885
2886You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2887output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2888
2889@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2890@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2891@cindex library search path in linker script
2892@cindex archive search path in linker script
2893@cindex search path in linker script
2894The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2895@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2896@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2897on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2898are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2899the command line option are searched first.
2900
2901@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2902@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2903@cindex first input file
2904The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2905that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2906though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2907when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2908first file.
2909@end table
2910
2911@ifclear SingleFormat
2912@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2913@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2914A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2915
2916@table @code
2917@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2918@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2919@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2920@cindex output file format in linker script
2921The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2922output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2923exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2924(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2925line option takes precedence.
2926
2927You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2928formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2929This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2930desired endianness.
2931
2932If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2933will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2934output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2935used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2936
2937For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2938command:
2939@smallexample
2940OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2941@end smallexample
2942This says that the default format for the output file is
2943@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2944option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2945format.
2946
2947@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2948@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2949@cindex input file format in linker script
2950The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2951files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2952This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2953(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2954is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2955command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2956@end table
2957@end ifclear
2958
2959@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2960@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2961There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2962
2963@table @code
2964@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2965@kindex ASSERT
2966@cindex assertion in linker script
2967Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2968with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2969
2970@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2971@kindex EXTERN
2972@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2973Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2974symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2975modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2976each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2977command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2978
2979@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2980@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2981@cindex common allocation in linker script
2982This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2983to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2984output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2985
4818e05f
AM
2986@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2987@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2988@cindex common allocation in linker script
2989This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2990command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2991to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2992
53d25da6
AM
2993@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2994@kindex INSERT
2995@cindex insert user script into default script
2996This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2997augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2998inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2999@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3000default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3001sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3002linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3003insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3004linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3005default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3006of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3007to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3008is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3009
3010@smallexample
3011SECTIONS
3012@{
3013 OVERLAY :
3014 @{
3015 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3016 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3017 @}
3018@}
3019INSERT AFTER .text;
3020@end smallexample
3021
252b5132
RH
3022@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3023@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3024@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3025This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3026references among certain output sections.
3027
3028In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3029using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3030will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3031errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3032a function defined in the other section.
3033
3034The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3035@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3036an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3037@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3038names.
3039
3040@ifclear SingleFormat
3041@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3042@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3043@cindex machine architecture
3044@cindex architecture
3045Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3046of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3047architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3048the @samp{-f} option.
3049@end ifclear
3050@end table
3051
3052@node Assignments
3053@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3054@cindex assignment in scripts
3055@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3056@cindex variables, defining
3057You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3058the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3059
3060@menu
3061* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3062* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3063* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3064* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3065@end menu
3066
3067@node Simple Assignments
3068@subsection Simple Assignments
3069
3070You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3071
3072@table @code
3073@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3074@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3075@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3076@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3077@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3078@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3079@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3080@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3081@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3082@end table
3083
3084The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3085@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3086defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3087
3088The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3089may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3090
3091The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3092
3093Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3094
3095You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3096statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3097section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3098
3099The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3100expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3101
3102Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3103assignments may be used:
3104
3105@smallexample
3106floating_point = 0;
3107SECTIONS
3108@{
3109 .text :
3110 @{
3111 *(.text)
3112 _etext = .;
3113 @}
156e34dd 3114 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3115 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3116@}
3117@end smallexample
3118@noindent
3119In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3120zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3121the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3122defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3123upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3124
3125@node PROVIDE
3126@subsection PROVIDE
3127@cindex PROVIDE
3128In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3129only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3130the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3131@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3132@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3133@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3134@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3135@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3136
3137Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3138@smallexample
3139SECTIONS
3140@{
3141 .text :
3142 @{
3143 *(.text)
3144 _etext = .;
3145 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3146 @}
3147@}
3148@end smallexample
3149
3150In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3151underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3152the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3153underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3154If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3155linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3156
7af8e998
L
3157@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3158@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3159@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3160Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3161hidden and won't be exported.
3162
73ae6183
NC
3163@node Source Code Reference
3164@subsection Source Code Reference
3165
3166Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3167intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3168a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3169symbol that does not have a value.
3170
3171Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3172transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3173stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3174prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3175mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3176of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3177variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3178linker script variable might be referred to as:
3179
3180@smallexample
3181 extern int foo;
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3185
3186@smallexample
3187 _foo = 1000;
3188@end smallexample
3189
3190In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3191transformation has taken place.
3192
3193When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3194things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3195in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3196second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3197table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3198contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3199value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3200
3201@smallexample
3202 int foo = 1000;
3203@end smallexample
3204
3205creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3206holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3207number 1000 is initially stored.
3208
3209When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3210first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3211memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3212So:
3213
3214@smallexample
3215 foo = 1;
3216@end smallexample
3217
3218looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3219associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3220address. Whereas:
3221
3222@smallexample
3223 int * a = & foo;
3224@end smallexample
3225
3226looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3227and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3228the variable @samp{a}.
3229
3230Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3231the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3232an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3233
3234@smallexample
3235 foo = 1000;
3236@end smallexample
3237
3238creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3239the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3240address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3241linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3242access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3243
3244Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3245you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3246use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3247section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3248linker script contains these declarations:
3249
3250@smallexample
3251@group
3252 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3253 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3254 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3255@end group
3256@end smallexample
3257
3258Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3259
3260@smallexample
3261@group
3262 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3263
73ae6183
NC
3264 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3265@end group
3266@end smallexample
3267
3268Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3269
252b5132 3270@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3271@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3272@kindex SECTIONS
3273The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3274into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3275
3276The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3277@smallexample
3278SECTIONS
3279@{
3280 @var{sections-command}
3281 @var{sections-command}
3282 @dots{}
3283@}
3284@end smallexample
3285
3286Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3287
3288@itemize @bullet
3289@item
3290an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3291@item
3292a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3293@item
3294an output section description
3295@item
3296an overlay description
3297@end itemize
3298
3299The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3300@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3301those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3302understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3303the layout of the output file.
3304
3305Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3306below.
3307
3308If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3309linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3310section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3311input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3312example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3313in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3314
3315@menu
3316* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3317* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3318* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3319* Input Section:: Input section description
3320* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3321* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3322* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3323* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3324* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3325@end menu
3326
3327@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3328@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3329The full description of an output section looks like this:
3330@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3331@group
7e7d5768 3332@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3333 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3334 @{
3335 @var{output-section-command}
3336 @var{output-section-command}
3337 @dots{}
562d3460 3338 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3339@end group
3340@end smallexample
3341
3342Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3343
3344The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3345name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3346The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3347
3348Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3349
3350@itemize @bullet
3351@item
3352a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3353@item
3354an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3355@item
3356data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3357@item
3358a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3359@end itemize
3360
3361@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3362@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3363@cindex name, section
3364@cindex section name
3365The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3366meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3367support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3368must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3369example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3370output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3371names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3372quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3373characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3374commas must be quoted.
3375
3376The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3377Discarding}.
3378
3379@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3380@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3381@cindex address, section
3382@cindex section address
3383The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3384address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3385the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3386based on the current value of the location counter.
3387
3388If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3389set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3390@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3391current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3392requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3393output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3394within the output section.
3395
3396For example,
3397@smallexample
3398.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3399@end smallexample
3400@noindent
3401and
3402@smallexample
3403.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3404@end smallexample
3405@noindent
3406are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3407@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3408counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3409counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3410section.
3411
3412The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3413For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3414so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3415do something like this:
3416@smallexample
3417.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3418@end smallexample
3419@noindent
3420This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3421aligned upward to the specified value.
3422
3423Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3424location counter.
3425
3426@node Input Section
36f63dca 3427@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3428@cindex input sections
3429@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3430The most common output section command is an input section description.
3431
3432The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3433You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3434in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3435map the input files into your memory layout.
3436
3437@menu
3438* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3439* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3440* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3441* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3442* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3443@end menu
3444
3445@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3446@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3447@cindex input section basics
3448An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3449by a list of section names in parentheses.
3450
3451The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3452describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3453
3454The most common input section description is to include all input
3455sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3456include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3457@smallexample
3458*(.text)
3459@end smallexample
3460@noindent
18625d54
CM
3461Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3462of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3463match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3464example:
252b5132 3465@smallexample
b4346c09 3466*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3467@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3468will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3469@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3470
3471There are two ways to include more than one section:
3472@smallexample
3473*(.text .rdata)
3474*(.text) *(.rdata)
3475@end smallexample
3476@noindent
3477The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3478@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3479first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3480they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3481@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3482@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3483
3484You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3485You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3486needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3487@smallexample
3488data.o(.data)
3489@end smallexample
3490
967928e9
AM
3491You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3492matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3493with no whitespace around the colon.
3494
3495@table @samp
3496@item archive:file
3497matches file within archive
3498@item archive:
3499matches the whole archive
3500@item :file
3501matches file but not one in an archive
3502@end table
3503
3504Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3505wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3506single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3507@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3508within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3509also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3510other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3511from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3512command.
3513
252b5132
RH
3514If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3515the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3516commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3517@smallexample
3518data.o
3519@end smallexample
3520
967928e9
AM
3521When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3522and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3523characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3524name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3525did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3526though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3527@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3528the archive search path.
3529
3530@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3531@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3532@cindex input section wildcards
3533@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3534@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3535@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3536In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3537name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3538
3539The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3540pattern for the file name.
3541
3542The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3543
3544@table @samp
3545@item *
3546matches any number of characters
3547@item ?
3548matches any single character
3549@item [@var{chars}]
3550matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3551character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3552@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3553@item \
3554quotes the following character
3555@end table
3556
3557When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3558will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3559Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3560exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3561@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3562a @samp{/} character.
3563
3564File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3565specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3566does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3567
3568If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3569appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3570will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3571sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3572@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3573@smallexample
3574.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3575.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3576@end smallexample
3577
bcaa7b3e 3578@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3579Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3580in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3581this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3582pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3583@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3584into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3585
bcaa7b3e
L
3586@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3587@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3588difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3589ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3590
3591@cindex SORT
3592@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3593
3594When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3595can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3596
3597@enumerate
3598@item
3599@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3600It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3601sections have the same name.
3602@item
3603@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3604It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3605sections have the same alignment.
3606@item
c0065db7 3607@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3608treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3609@item
3610@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3611is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3612@item
3613All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3614@end enumerate
3615
3616When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3617section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3618takes precedence over the command line option.
3619
3620If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3621command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3622treated as nested sorting command.
3623
3624@enumerate
3625@item
3626@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3627@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3628@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3629@item
3630@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3631@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3632@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3633@end enumerate
3634
3635If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3636command line option will be ignored.
3637
252b5132
RH
3638If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3639@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3640precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3641
3642This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3643files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3644sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3645The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3646with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3647linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3648@smallexample
3649@group
3650SECTIONS @{
3651 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3652 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3653 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3654 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3655@}
3656@end group
3657@end smallexample
3658
3659@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3660@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3661@cindex common symbol placement
3662@cindex uninitialized data placement
3663A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3664file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3665linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3666named @samp{COMMON}.
3667
3668You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3669other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3670particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3671input files are placed in another section.
3672
3673In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3674@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3675@smallexample
3676.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3677@end smallexample
3678
3679@cindex scommon section
3680@cindex small common symbols
3681Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3682example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3683symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3684different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3685the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3686symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3687to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3688locations.
3689
3690@cindex [COMMON]
3691You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3692notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3693@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3694
3695@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3696@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3697@cindex KEEP
3698@cindex garbage collection
3699When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3700it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3701This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3702with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3703@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3704
3705@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3706@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3707The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3708to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3709start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3710@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3711follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3712@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3713@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3714All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3715files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3716
3717@smallexample
3718@group
3719SECTIONS @{
3720 outputa 0x10000 :
3721 @{
3722 all.o
3723 foo.o (.input1)
3724 @}
36f63dca
NC
3725@end group
3726@group
252b5132
RH
3727 outputb :
3728 @{
3729 foo.o (.input2)
3730 foo1.o (.input1)
3731 @}
36f63dca
NC
3732@end group
3733@group
252b5132
RH
3734 outputc :
3735 @{
3736 *(.input1)
3737 *(.input2)
3738 @}
3739@}
3740@end group
a1ab1d2a 3741@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3742
3743@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3744@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3745@cindex data
3746@cindex section data
3747@cindex output section data
3748@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3749@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3750@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3751@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3752@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3753You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3754@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3755an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3756parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3757value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3758counter.
3759
3760The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3761store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3762bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3763stored.
3764
3765For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3766of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3767@smallexample
3768BYTE(1)
3769LONG(addr)
3770@end smallexample
3771
3772When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3773same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3774target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3775@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3776@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3777
3778If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3779which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3780When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3781true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3782endianness of the first input object file.
3783
36f63dca 3784Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3785between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3786@smallexample
3787SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3788@end smallexample
3789whereas this will work:
3790@smallexample
3791SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3792@end smallexample
3793
252b5132
RH
3794@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3795@cindex holes, filling
3796@cindex unspecified memory
3797You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3798current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3799otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3800gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3801with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3802necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3803point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3804than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3805different parts of an output section.
3806
3807This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3808value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3809@smallexample
563e308f 3810FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3811@end smallexample
3812
3813The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3814section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3815part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3816entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3817precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3818expression.
252b5132
RH
3819
3820@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3821@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3822There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3823commands.
3824
3825@table @code
3826@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3827@cindex input filename symbols
3828@cindex filename symbols
3829@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3830The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3831The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3832file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3833the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3834
3835This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3836normally used for any other object file format.
3837
3838@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3839@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3840@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3841@item CONSTRUCTORS
3842When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3843unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3844destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3845arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3846automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3847For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3848linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3849@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3850ignored for other object file formats.
3851
3852The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3853constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3854Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3855the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3856first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3857of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3858compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3859formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3860@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3861the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3862destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3863@code{exit}.
3864
3865For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3866arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3867addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3868and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3869linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3870runtime code expects to see.
3871
3872@smallexample
3873 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3874 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3875 *(.ctors)
3876 LONG(0)
3877 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3878 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3879 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3880 *(.dtors)
3881 LONG(0)
3882 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3883@end smallexample
3884
3885If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3886which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3887are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3888are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3889command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3890@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3891@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3892@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3893
3894Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3895and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3896need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3897scripts.
3898
3899@end table
3900
3901@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3902@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3903@cindex discarding sections
3904@cindex sections, discarding
3905@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3906The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3907for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3908be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3909@smallexample
49c13adb 3910.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3911@end smallexample
3912@noindent
3913will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3914@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3915sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3916space in an output section will also create the output section.
3917
a0976ea4 3918The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3919on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3920symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3921the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3922section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3923
3924@cindex /DISCARD/
3925The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3926input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3927section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3928
3929@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3930@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3931@cindex output section attributes
3932We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3933like this:
3934@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3935@group
7e7d5768 3936@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3937 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3938 @{
3939 @var{output-section-command}
3940 @var{output-section-command}
3941 @dots{}
562d3460 3942 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3943@end group
3944@end smallexample
3945We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3946@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3947remaining section attributes.
3948
a1ab1d2a 3949@menu
252b5132
RH
3950* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3951* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3952* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3953* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3954* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3955* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3956* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3957@end menu
3958
3959@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3960@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3961Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3962parentheses. The following types are defined:
3963
3964@table @code
3965@item NOLOAD
3966The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3967loaded into memory when the program is run.
3968@item DSECT
3969@itemx COPY
3970@itemx INFO
3971@itemx OVERLAY
3972These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3973rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3974marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3975section when the program is run.
3976@end table
3977
3978@kindex NOLOAD
3979@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3980@cindex loading, preventing
3981The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3982the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3983the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3984@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3985need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3986@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3987@smallexample
3988@group
3989SECTIONS @{
3990 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3991 @dots{}
3992@}
3993@end group
3994@end smallexample
3995
3996@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3997@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3998@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3999@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4000@cindex load address
4001@cindex section load address
4002Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4003@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4004an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4005Address}).
4006
dc0b6aa0
AM
4007The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4008the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4009
4010Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4011specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4012Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4013linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4014
4015If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4016section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4017VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4018section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4019or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4020to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4021@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4022
4023@cindex ROM initialized data
4024@cindex initialized data in ROM
4025This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4026example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4027called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4028@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4029even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4030uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4031defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4032counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4033
4034@smallexample
4035@group
4036SECTIONS
4037 @{
4038 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4039 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4040 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4041 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4042 .bss 0x3000 :
4043 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4044@}
4045@end group
4046@end smallexample
4047
4048The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4049this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4050the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4051how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4052script.
4053
4054@smallexample
4055@group
4056extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4057char *src = &_etext;
4058char *dst = &_data;
4059
4060/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4061while (dst < &_edata) @{
4062 *dst++ = *src++;
4063@}
4064
4065/* Zero bss */
4066for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4067 *dst = 0;
4068@end group
4069@end smallexample
4070
bbf115d3
L
4071@node Forced Output Alignment
4072@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4073@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4074@cindex forcing output section alignment
4075@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4076You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4077
7e7d5768
AM
4078@node Forced Input Alignment
4079@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4080@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4081@cindex forcing input section alignment
4082@cindex input section alignment
4083You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4084SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4085sections, whether larger or smaller.
4086
252b5132 4087@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4088@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4089@kindex >@var{region}
4090@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4091@cindex memory regions and sections
4092You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4093using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4094
4095Here is a simple example:
4096@smallexample
4097@group
4098MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4099SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4100@end group
4101@end smallexample
4102
4103@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4104@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4105@kindex :@var{phdr}
4106@cindex section, assigning to program header
4107@cindex program headers and sections
4108You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4109using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4110one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4111assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4112@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4113linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4114
4115Here is a simple example:
4116@smallexample
4117@group
4118PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4119SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4120@end group
4121@end smallexample
4122
4123@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4124@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4125@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4126@cindex section fill pattern
4127@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4128You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4129@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4130(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4131within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4132alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4133necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4134of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4135an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4136fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4137other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4138pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4139expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4140
4141You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4142output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4143
4144Here is a simple example:
4145@smallexample
4146@group
563e308f 4147SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4148@end group
4149@end smallexample
4150
4151@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4152@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4153@kindex OVERLAY
4154@cindex overlays
4155An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4156are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4157the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4158copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4159required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4160can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4161than another.
4162
4163Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4164@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4165output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4166command is as follows:
4167@smallexample
4168@group
4169OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4170 @{
4171 @var{secname1}
4172 @{
4173 @var{output-section-command}
4174 @var{output-section-command}
4175 @dots{}
4176 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4177 @var{secname2}
4178 @{
4179 @var{output-section-command}
4180 @var{output-section-command}
4181 @dots{}
4182 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4183 @dots{}
4184 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4185@end group
4186@end smallexample
4187
4188Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4189section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4190section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4191those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4192except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4193sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4194
4195The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4196addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4197memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4198whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4199and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4200and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4201
4202If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4203among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4204all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4205section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4206NOCROSSREFS}.
4207
4208For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4209provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4210defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4211@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4212the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4213within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4214symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4215
4216At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4217the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4218
4219Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4220@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4221@smallexample
4222@group
4223 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4224 @{
4225 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4226 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4227 @}
4228@end group
4229@end smallexample
4230@noindent
4231This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4232address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4233@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4234following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4235@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4236@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4237
4238C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4239like the following.
4240
4241@smallexample
4242@group
4243 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4244 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4245 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4246@end group
4247@end smallexample
4248
4249Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4250everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4251example could have been written identically as follows.
4252
4253@smallexample
4254@group
4255 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4256 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4257 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4258 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4259 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4260 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4261 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4262@end group
4263@end smallexample
4264
4265@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4266@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4267@kindex MEMORY
4268@cindex memory regions
4269@cindex regions of memory
4270@cindex allocating memory
4271@cindex discontinuous memory
4272The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4273memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4274
4275The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4276memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4277may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4278can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4279set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4280regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4281around to fit into the available regions.
4282
4283A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4284command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4285you wish. The syntax is:
4286@smallexample
4287@group
a1ab1d2a 4288MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4289 @{
4290 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4291 @dots{}
4292 @}
4293@end group
4294@end smallexample
4295
4296The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4297region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4298Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4299with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4300must have a distinct name.
4301
4302@cindex memory region attributes
4303The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4304whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4305not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4306@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4307section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4308the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4309them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4310
4311The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4312@table @samp
4313@item R
4314Read-only section
4315@item W
4316Read/write section
4317@item X
4318Executable section
4319@item A
4320Allocatable section
4321@item I
4322Initialized section
4323@item L
4324Same as @samp{I}
4325@item !
4326Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4327@end table
4328
4329If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4330@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4331attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4332in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4333attributes.
4334
4335@kindex ORIGIN =
4336@kindex o =
4337@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4338The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4339the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4340cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4341abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4342@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4343
4344@kindex LENGTH =
4345@kindex len =
4346@kindex l =
4347The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4348region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4349be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4350@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4351
4352In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4353available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4354and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4355linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4356is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4357or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4358explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4359region.
4360
4361@smallexample
4362@group
a1ab1d2a 4363MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4364 @{
4365 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4366 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4367 @}
4368@end group
4369@end smallexample
4370
4371Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4372specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4373@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4374a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4375output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4376was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4377the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4378output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4379region, the linker will issue an error message.
4380
3ec57632 4381It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4382expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4383@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4384
4385@smallexample
4386@group
c0065db7 4387 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4388@end group
4389@end smallexample
4390
252b5132
RH
4391@node PHDRS
4392@section PHDRS Command
4393@kindex PHDRS
4394@cindex program headers
4395@cindex ELF program headers
4396@cindex program segments
4397@cindex segments, ELF
4398The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4399@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4400loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4401program with the @samp{-p} option.
4402
4403When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4404reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4405program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4406This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4407interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4408
4409The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4410in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4411precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4412the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4413not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4414
4415The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4416generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4417ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4418
4419This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4420@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4421
4422@smallexample
4423@group
4424PHDRS
4425@{
4426 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4427 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4428@}
4429@end group
4430@end smallexample
4431
4432The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4433of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4434header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4435with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4436must have a distinct name.
4437
4438Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4439system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4440specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4441sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4442attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4443Section Phdr}.
4444
4445It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4446merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4447repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4448contain the section.
4449
4450If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4451then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4452not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4453convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4454placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4455default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4456segment at all.
4457
4458@kindex FILEHDR
4459@kindex PHDRS
4460You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4461the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4462The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4463file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4464include the ELF program headers themselves.
4465
4466The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4467value of the keyword.
4468
4469@table @asis
4470@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4471Indicates an unused program header.
4472
4473@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4474Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4475the file.
4476
4477@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4478Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4479
4480@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4481Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4482found.
4483
4484@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4485Indicates a segment holding note information.
4486
4487@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4488A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4489ABI.
4490
4491@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4492Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4493
4494@item @var{expression}
4495An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4496be used for types not defined above.
4497@end table
4498
4499You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4500in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4501@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4502Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4503output section attribute.
4504
4505The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4506which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4507explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4508an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4509header.
4510
4511Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4512headers used on a native ELF system.
4513
4514@example
4515@group
4516PHDRS
4517@{
4518 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4519 interp PT_INTERP ;
4520 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4521 data PT_LOAD ;
4522 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4523@}
4524
4525SECTIONS
4526@{
4527 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4528 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4529 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4530 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4531 @dots{}
4532 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4533 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4534 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4535 @dots{}
4536@}
4537@end group
4538@end example
4539
4540@node VERSION
4541@section VERSION Command
4542@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4543@cindex symbol versions
4544@cindex version script
4545@cindex versions of symbols
4546The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4547only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4548symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4549a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4550shared library.
4551
4552You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4553you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4554also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4555
4556The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4557@smallexample
4558VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4559@end smallexample
4560
4561The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4562Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4563version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4564version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4565version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4566scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4567library.
4568
4569The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4570examples.
4571
4572@smallexample
4573VERS_1.1 @{
4574 global:
4575 foo1;
4576 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4577 old*;
4578 original*;
4579 new*;
252b5132
RH
4580@};
4581
4582VERS_1.2 @{
4583 foo2;
4584@} VERS_1.1;
4585
4586VERS_2.0 @{
4587 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4588 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4589 ns::*;
4590 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4591 @}
252b5132
RH
4592@} VERS_1.2;
4593@end smallexample
4594
4595This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4596version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4597The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4598a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4599of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4600symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4601is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4602in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4603However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4604name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4605
4606Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4607depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4608to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4609
4610Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4611depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4612and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4613
4614When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4615specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4616unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4617unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4618somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4619wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4620wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4621set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4622ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4623
4624The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4625they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4626could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4627However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4628
0f6bf451 4629Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4630in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4631symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4632won't.
4633
4634@smallexample
7c9c73be 4635@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4636@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4637
252b5132
RH
4638When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4639symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4640requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4641shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4642loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4643linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4644application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4645way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4646all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4647search for each symbol reference.
4648
4649The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4650doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4651that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4652functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4653the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4654required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4655that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4656versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4657the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4658
4659There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4660first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4661source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4662script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4663maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4664@smallexample
4665__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4666@end smallexample
4667@noindent
4668in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4669be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4670The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4671@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4672takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4673
4674The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4675function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4676an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4677version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4678linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4679
4680To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4681source file. Here is an example:
4682
4683@smallexample
4684__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4685__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4686__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4687__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4688@end smallexample
4689
4690In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4691unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4692example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4693@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4694
4695When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4696some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4697this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4698@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4699declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4700you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4701
4702If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4703within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4704(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4705specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4706
cb840a31
L
4707You can also specify the language in the version script:
4708
4709@smallexample
4710VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4711@end smallexample
4712
c0065db7 4713The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4714The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4715demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4716patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4717
86043bbb
MM
4718Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4719described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4720or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4721the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4722whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4723cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4724might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4725should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4726expect when you upgrade.
4727
252b5132
RH
4728@node Expressions
4729@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4730@cindex expressions
4731@cindex arithmetic
4732The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4733that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4734expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4735host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4736
4737You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4738
4739The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4740expressions.
4741
4742@menu
4743* Constants:: Constants
4744* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4745* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4746* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4747* Operators:: Operators
4748* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4749* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4750* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4751@end menu
4752
4753@node Constants
4754@subsection Constants
4755@cindex integer notation
4756@cindex constants in linker scripts
4757All constants are integers.
4758
4759As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4760octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4761hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4762@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4763@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4764value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4765
4766@cindex scaled integers
4767@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4768@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4769@cindex suffixes for integers
4770@cindex integer suffixes
4771In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4772constant by
4773@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4774@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4775@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4776@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4777@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4778@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4779@tex
4780${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4781@end tex
4782@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
4783respectively. For example, the following
4784all refer to the same quantity:
4785
252b5132 4786@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4787_fourk_1 = 4K;
4788_fourk_2 = 4096;
4789_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 4790_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
4791@end smallexample
4792
8a308ae8
NC
4793Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
4794conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
4795
252b5132
RH
4796@node Symbols
4797@subsection Symbol Names
4798@cindex symbol names
4799@cindex names
4800@cindex quoted symbol names
4801@kindex "
4802Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4803and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4804Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4805specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4806keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4807@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4808"SECTION" = 9;
4809"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4810@end smallexample
4811
4812Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4813to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4814whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4815
ecca9871
L
4816@node Orphan Sections
4817@subsection Orphan Sections
4818@cindex orphan
4819Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4820are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4821script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4822output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4823placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4824attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4825same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4826If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4827at the end of the file.
4828
4829For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4830well as section flag.
4831
41911f68 4832If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4833the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4834__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4835section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4836orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4837representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4838character.
4839
252b5132
RH
4840@node Location Counter
4841@subsection The Location Counter
4842@kindex .
4843@cindex dot
4844@cindex location counter
4845@cindex current output location
4846The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4847current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4848location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4849within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4850anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4851
4852@cindex holes
4853Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4854moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4855location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4856and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4857doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4858
4859@smallexample
4860SECTIONS
4861@{
4862 output :
4863 @{
4864 file1(.text)
4865 . = . + 1000;
4866 file2(.text)
4867 . += 1000;
4868 file3(.text)
563e308f 4869 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4870@}
4871@end smallexample
4872@noindent
4873In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4874located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4875followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4876@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4877@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4878specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4879
5c6bbab8
NC
4880@cindex dot inside sections
4881Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4882current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4883statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4884absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4885however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4886not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4887
4888@smallexample
4889SECTIONS
4890@{
4891 . = 0x100
4892 .text: @{
4893 *(.text)
4894 . = 0x200
4895 @}
4896 . = 0x500
4897 .data: @{
4898 *(.data)
4899 . += 0x600
4900 @}
4901@}
4902@end smallexample
4903
4904The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4905and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4906the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4907much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4908move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4909and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4910the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4911the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4912
b5666f2f
AM
4913@cindex dot outside sections
4914Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4915output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4916needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4917
4918@smallexample
4919SECTIONS
4920@{
4921 start_of_text = . ;
4922 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4923 end_of_text = . ;
4924
4925 start_of_data = . ;
4926 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4927 end_of_data = . ;
4928@}
4929@end smallexample
4930
4931If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4932not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4933between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4934should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4935blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4936the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4937sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4938statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4939special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4940place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4941as follows:
4942
4943@smallexample
4944SECTIONS
4945@{
4946 start_of_text = . ;
4947 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4948 end_of_text = . ;
4949
4950 start_of_data = . ;
4951 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4952 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4953 end_of_data = . ;
4954@}
4955@end smallexample
4956
4957This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4958@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4959placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4960assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4961a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4962section. So you could write:
4963
4964@smallexample
4965SECTIONS
4966@{
4967 start_of_text = . ;
4968 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4969 end_of_text = . ;
4970
4971 . = . ;
4972 start_of_data = . ;
4973 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4974 end_of_data = . ;
4975@}
4976@end smallexample
4977
4978Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4979@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4980
252b5132
RH
4981@need 2000
4982@node Operators
4983@subsection Operators
4984@cindex operators for arithmetic
4985@cindex arithmetic operators
4986@cindex precedence in expressions
4987The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4988the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4989@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4990@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4991@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4992@smallexample
4993precedence associativity Operators Notes
4994(highest)
49951 left ! - ~ (1)
49962 left * / %
49973 left + -
49984 left >> <<
49995 left == != > < <= >=
50006 left &
50017 left |
50028 left &&
50039 left ||
500410 right ? :
500511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5006(lowest)
5007@end smallexample
5008Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5009(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5010(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5011@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5012@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5013@tex
5014\vskip \baselineskip
5015%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5016\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5017\hrule
5018\halign
5019{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5020height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5021&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5022height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5023\noalign{\hrule}
5024height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5025&highest&&&&&\cr
5026% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5027&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5028&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5029&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5030&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5031&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5032&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5033&7&&left&&|&\cr
5034&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5035&9&&left&&||&\cr
5036&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5037&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5038&lowest&&&&&\cr
5039height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5040\hrule}
5041@end tex
5042@iftex
5043{
5044@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5045@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5046@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5047}
5048@end iftex
5049@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5050
5051@node Evaluation
5052@subsection Evaluation
5053@cindex lazy evaluation
5054@cindex expression evaluation order
5055The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5056an expression when absolutely necessary.
5057
5058The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5059address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5060regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5061as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5062
5063However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5064until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5065other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5066for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5067
5068The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5069assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5070allocation.
5071
5072Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5073@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5074
5075If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5076available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5077following
5078@smallexample
5079@group
5080SECTIONS
5081 @{
a1ab1d2a 5082 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5083 @{ *(.text) @}
5084 @}
5085@end group
5086@end smallexample
5087@noindent
5088will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5089address}.
5090
5091@node Expression Section
5092@subsection The Section of an Expression
5093@cindex expression sections
5094@cindex absolute expressions
5095@cindex relative expressions
5096@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5097@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5098@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5099When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5100or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5101fixed offset from the base of a section.
5102
5103The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5104whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5105an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5106section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5107
5108A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5109relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5110further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5111section will be the section of the relative expression.
5112
5113A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5114through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5115will not have any particular associated section.
5116
5117You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5118to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5119create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5120section @samp{.data}:
5121@smallexample
5122SECTIONS
5123 @{
5124 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5125 @}
5126@end smallexample
5127@noindent
5128If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5129@samp{.data} section.
5130
5131@node Builtin Functions
5132@subsection Builtin Functions
5133@cindex functions in expressions
5134The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5135use in linker script expressions.
5136
5137@table @code
5138@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5139@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5140@cindex expression, absolute
5141Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5142of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5143value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5144normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5145
5146@item ADDR(@var{section})
5147@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5148@cindex section address in expression
5149Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5150script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5151the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5152identical values:
5153@smallexample
5154@group
5155SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5156 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5157 @{
252b5132
RH
5158 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5159 @dots{}
5160 @}
5161 .output :
5162 @{
5163 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5164 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5165 @}
5166@dots{} @}
5167@end group
5168@end smallexample
5169
876f4090
NS
5170@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5171@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5172@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5173@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5174@cindex round up location counter
5175@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5176@cindex round up expression
5177@cindex align expression
5178Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5179to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5180doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5181arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5182expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5183equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5184
5185Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5186next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5187variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5188input sections:
252b5132
RH
5189@smallexample
5190@group
5191SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5192 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5193 *(.data)
5194 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5195 @}
5196@dots{} @}
5197@end group
5198@end smallexample
5199@noindent
5200The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5201a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5202a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5203of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5204
5205The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5206
362c1d1a
NS
5207@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5208@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5209@cindex section alignment
5210Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5211been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5212evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5213the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5214value in that section.
5215@smallexample
5216@group
5217SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5218 .output @{
5219 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5220 @dots{}
5221 @}
5222@dots{} @}
5223@end group
5224@end smallexample
5225
252b5132
RH
5226@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5227@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5228This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5229scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5230section.
5231
2d20f7bf
JJ
5232@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5233@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5234This is equivalent to either
5235@smallexample
5236(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5237@end smallexample
5238or
5239@smallexample
5240(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5241@end smallexample
5242@noindent
5243depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5244for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5245@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5246If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5247memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5248bytes in the on-disk file.
5249
5250This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5251any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5252@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5253be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5254working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5255
5256@noindent
5257Example:
5258@smallexample
5259 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5260@end smallexample
5261
5262@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5263@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5264This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5265evaluation purposes.
5266
5267@smallexample
5268 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5269@end smallexample
5270
a4f5ad88
JJ
5271@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5272@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5273This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5274@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5275When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5276does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5277@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5278boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5279it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5280@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5281
5282@smallexample
5283 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5284@end smallexample
5285
252b5132
RH
5286@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5287@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5288@cindex symbol defaults
5289Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5290defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5291return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5292default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5293shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5294the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5295existed, its value is preserved:
5296
5297@smallexample
5298@group
5299SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5300 .text : @{
5301 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5302 @dots{}
5303 @}
5304 @dots{}
5305@}
5306@end group
5307@end smallexample
5308
3ec57632
NC
5309@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5310@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5311Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5312
252b5132
RH
5313@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5314@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5315@cindex section load address in expression
5316Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5317the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5318attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5319Section LMA}).
5320
5321@kindex MAX
5322@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5323Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5324
5325@kindex MIN
5326@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5327Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5328
5329@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5330@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5331@cindex unallocated address, next
5332Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5333This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5334use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5335output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5336
3ec57632
NC
5337@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5338@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5339Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5340
ba916c8a
MM
5341@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5342@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5343Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5344value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5345option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5346@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5347be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5348``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5349name.
5350
252b5132
RH
5351@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5352@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5353@cindex section size
5354Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5355been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5356evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5357@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5358@smallexample
5359@group
5360SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5361 .output @{
5362 .start = . ;
5363 @dots{}
5364 .end = . ;
5365 @}
5366 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5367 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5368@dots{} @}
5369@end group
5370@end smallexample
5371
5372@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5373@itemx sizeof_headers
5374@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5375@cindex header size
5376Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5377information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5378this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5379choose, to facilitate paging.
5380
5381@cindex not enough room for program headers
5382@cindex program headers, not enough room
5383When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5384@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5385number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5386addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5387additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5388room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5389the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5390script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5391you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5392command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5393@end table
5394
5395@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5396@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5397@cindex implicit linker scripts
5398If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5399an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5400linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5401linker will report an error.
5402
5403An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5404
5405Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5406assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5407commands.
5408
5409Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5410at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5411read. This can affect archive searching.
5412
5413@ifset GENERIC
5414@node Machine Dependent
5415@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5416
5417@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5418@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5419sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5420functionality are not listed.
5421
5422@menu
36f63dca
NC
5423@ifset H8300
5424* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5425@end ifset
5426@ifset I960
5427* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5428@end ifset
5429@ifset ARM
5430* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5431@end ifset
5432@ifset HPPA
5433* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5434@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5435@ifset M68K
5436* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5437@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5438@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5439* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5440@end ifset
2469cfa2 5441@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5442* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5443@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5444@ifset M68HC11
5445* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5446@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5447@ifset POWERPC
5448* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5449@end ifset
5450@ifset POWERPC64
5451* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5452@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5453@ifset SPU
5454* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5455@end ifset
74459f0e 5456@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5457* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5458@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5459@ifset WIN32
5460* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5461@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5462@ifset XTENSA
5463* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5464@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5465@end menu
5466@end ifset
5467
252b5132
RH
5468@ifset H8300
5469@ifclear GENERIC
5470@raisesections
5471@end ifclear
5472
5473@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5474@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5475
5476@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5477For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5478you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5479
5480@table @emph
5481@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5482@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5483@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5484targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5485program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5486respectively.
5487
5488@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5489@item synthesizing instructions
5490@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5491@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5492sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5493page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5494(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5495@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5496top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5497
5498@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5499@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5500biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5501which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5502page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5503(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5504@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5505the top page of memory).
5506
5507@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5508@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
550932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5510changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5511(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5512@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5513the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5514@end table
5515
5516@ifclear GENERIC
5517@lowersections
5518@end ifclear
5519@end ifset
5520
36f63dca 5521@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5522@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5523@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5524@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5525@node Renesas
5526@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5527
c2dcd04e
NC
5528@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5529H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5530options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5531@end ifset
5532@end ifclear
5533
5534@ifset I960
5535@ifclear GENERIC
5536@raisesections
5537@end ifclear
5538
5539@node i960
5540@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5541
5542@cindex i960 support
5543
5544You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5545specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5546family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5547incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5548linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5549libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5550search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5551
5552For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5553well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5554paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5555the names
5556
5557@smallexample
5558@group
5559try
5560libtry.a
5561tryca
5562libtryca.a
5563@end group
5564@end smallexample
5565
5566@noindent
5567The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5568two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5569
5570You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5571the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5572use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5573specifies a library.
5574
5575@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5576@cindex relaxing on i960
5577@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5578you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5579@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5580them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5581instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5582instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5583target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5584not itself call any subroutines).
5585
5586@ifclear GENERIC
5587@lowersections
5588@end ifclear
5589@end ifset
5590
5591@ifset ARM
5592@ifclear GENERIC
5593@raisesections
5594@end ifclear
5595
93fd0973
SC
5596@ifset M68HC11
5597@ifclear GENERIC
5598@raisesections
5599@end ifclear
5600
5601@node M68HC11/68HC12
5602@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5603
5604@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5605
5606@subsection Linker Relaxation
5607
5608For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5609optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5610
5611@table @emph
5612@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5613@item relaxing address modes
5614@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5615targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5616program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5617respectively.
5618
5619@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5620transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5621page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5622
5623@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5624When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5625of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5626addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5627@code{bset} instructions.
5628
5629@end table
5630
5631@subsection Trampoline Generation
5632
5633@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5634@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5635For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5636call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5637will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5638trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5639case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5640point to the function trampoline.
5641
5642@ifclear GENERIC
5643@lowersections
5644@end ifclear
5645@end ifset
5646
36f63dca 5647@node ARM
3674e28a 5648@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5649
5650@cindex ARM interworking support
5651@kindex --support-old-code
5652For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5653between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5654been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5655line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5656libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5657option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5658given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5659which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5660the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5661non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5662
5663@cindex thumb entry point
5664@cindex entry point, thumb
5665@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5666The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5667@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5668But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5669branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5670executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5671
ce11ba6c
KT
5672@cindex PE import table prefixing
5673@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5674The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5675the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5676elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5677import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5678
e489d0ae
PB
5679@cindex BE8
5680@kindex --be8
5681The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5682executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5683The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5684
3674e28a
PB
5685@cindex TARGET1
5686@kindex --target1-rel
5687@kindex --target1-abs
5688The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5689@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5690or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5691and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5692
5693@cindex TARGET2
5694@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5695The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5696@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5697meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5698@table @samp
5699@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5700@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5701@item abs
5702@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5703@item got-rel
5704@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5705@end table
5706
319850b4
JB
5707@cindex FIX_V4BX
5708@kindex --fix-v4bx
5709The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5710specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5711interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5712also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5713
5714In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5715linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5716@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5717
5718In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5719relocations are ignored.
5720
845b51d6
PB
5721@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5722@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5723Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5724relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5725
5726@smallexample
5727TST rM, #1
5728MOVEQ PC, rM
5729BX Rn
5730@end smallexample
5731
5732This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5733and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5734condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5735
33bfe774
JB
5736@cindex USE_BLX
5737@kindex --use-blx
5738The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5739BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5740situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5741code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5742each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5743
5744This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5745specify it if you are using that target.
5746
c6dd86c6
JB
5747@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5748@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5749The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5750bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5751instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5752to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5753the support code can read the intended values.
5754
5755The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5756intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5757and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5758intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5759full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5760you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5761
5762If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5763enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5764@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5765mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5766vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5767@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5768
5769If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5770potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5771such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5772first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5773instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5774the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5775are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5776
bf21ed78
MS
5777@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5778@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5779The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5780warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5781enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5782linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5783using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5784not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5785
5786@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5787@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5788The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5789warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5790@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5791linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5792using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5793
726150b7
NC
5794@cindex PIC_VENEER
5795@kindex --pic-veneer
5796The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5797ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5798is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5799@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5800
5801@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5802@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5803The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5804code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5805perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5806placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5807controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5808The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5809duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5810group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5811code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5812where they should be placed.
5813
5814The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5815@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5816placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5817branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5818placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5819value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5820exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5821A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5822linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5823from the input sections.
5824
5825The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5826@samp{N = +1}.
5827
1a51c1a4
NC
5828Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5829only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5830otherwise.
5831
36f63dca
NC
5832@ifclear GENERIC
5833@lowersections
5834@end ifclear
5835@end ifset
5836
5837@ifset HPPA
5838@ifclear GENERIC
5839@raisesections
5840@end ifclear
5841
5842@node HPPA ELF32
5843@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5844@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5845@kindex --multi-subspace
5846When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5847import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5848The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5849stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5850multiple sub-spaces.
5851
5852@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5853@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5854Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5855stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5856@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5857sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5858a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5859the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5860conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5861prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5862A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5863branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5864@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5865@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5866detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5867positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5868
5869Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5870single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5871create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5872large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5873
5874@ifclear GENERIC
5875@lowersections
5876@end ifclear
5877@end ifset
5878
7fb9f789
NC
5879@ifset M68K
5880@ifclear GENERIC
5881@raisesections
5882@end ifclear
5883
5884@node M68K
5885@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5886
5887@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5888@kindex --got=@var{type}
5889The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5890The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5891@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5892the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5893@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5894entries only at non-negative offsets.
5895@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5896entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5897support such GOTs.
5898@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5899output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5900file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5901files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5902
5903@ifclear GENERIC
5904@lowersections
5905@end ifclear
5906@end ifset
5907
36f63dca
NC
5908@ifset MMIX
5909@ifclear GENERIC
5910@raisesections
5911@end ifclear
5912
5913@node MMIX
5914@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5915For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5916@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5917understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5918can translate between the two formats.
5919
5920There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5921Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5922registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5923equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5924@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5925global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5926this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5927symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5928
7a2de473
HPN
5929Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5930@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
5931The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
5932of a section.
36f63dca
NC
5933
5934Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5935are left out from an mmo file.
5936
5937@ifclear GENERIC
5938@lowersections
5939@end ifclear
5940@end ifset
5941
5942@ifset MSP430
5943@ifclear GENERIC
5944@raisesections
5945@end ifclear
5946
5947@node MSP430
5948@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5949For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5950will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5951just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5952
5953@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5954The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5955
5956@table @code
5957@item @samp{.vectors}
5958Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5959
5960@item @samp{.bootloader}
5961Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5962in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5963
5964@item @samp{.infomem}
5965Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5966this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5967
c0065db7 5968@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5969This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5970in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5971
5972@item @samp{.noinit}
5973Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5974
c0065db7 5975The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5976@end table
5977
5978@ifclear GENERIC
5979@lowersections
5980@end ifclear
5981@end ifset
5982
2a60a7a8
AM
5983@ifset POWERPC
5984@ifclear GENERIC
5985@raisesections
5986@end ifclear
5987
5988@node PowerPC ELF32
5989@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5990@cindex PowerPC long branches
5991@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5992Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5993displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5994@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5995@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5996the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5997section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5998section exceeds 33M in size.
5999
6000@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6001@table @option
6002@cindex PowerPC PLT
6003@kindex --bss-plt
6004@item --bss-plt
6005Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6006generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6007the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6008writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6009@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6010PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6011compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6012BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6013
016687f8
AM
6014@kindex --secure-plt
6015@item --secure-plt
6016@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6017@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6018when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6019layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6020style BSS PLT.
6021
2a60a7a8
AM
6022@cindex PowerPC GOT
6023@kindex --sdata-got
6024@item --sdata-got
6025The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6026sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6027@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6028section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6029@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6030@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6031@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6032@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6033PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6034pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6035GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6036really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6037
6038@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6039@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6040@item --emit-stub-syms
6041This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6042symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6043
6044@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6045@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6046@item --no-tls-optimize
6047PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6048sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6049disable the optimization.
6050@end table
6051
6052@ifclear GENERIC
6053@lowersections
6054@end ifclear
6055@end ifset
6056
6057@ifset POWERPC64
6058@ifclear GENERIC
6059@raisesections
6060@end ifclear
6061
6062@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6063@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6064
6065@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6066@table @option
6067@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6068@kindex --stub-group-size
6069@item --stub-group-size
6070Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6071by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6072@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6073sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6074a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6075the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6076conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6077prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6078A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6079branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6080@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6081@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6082detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6083positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6084
6085Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6086single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6087create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6088large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6089
6090@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6091@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6092@item --emit-stub-syms
6093This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6094symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6095
6096@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6097@kindex --dotsyms
6098@kindex --no-dotsyms
6099@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6100These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6101in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6102function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6103code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6104properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6105to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6106@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6107dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6108feature.
6109
6110@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6111@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6112@item --no-tls-optimize
6113PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6114sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6115disable the optimization.
6116
6117@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6118@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6119@item --no-opd-optimize
6120PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6121corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6122the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6123Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6124
6125@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6126@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6127@item --non-overlapping-opd
6128Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6129@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6130the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6131entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6132
6133@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6134@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6135@item --no-toc-optimize
6136PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6137entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6138reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6139marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6140marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6141relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6142unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6143reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6144discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6145reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6146code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6147optimization.
6148
6149@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6150@kindex --no-multi-toc
6151@item --no-multi-toc
6152By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6153entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6154total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6155grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6156TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6157calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6158help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
615964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6160Use this option to turn off this feature.
6161@end table
6162
6163@ifclear GENERIC
6164@lowersections
6165@end ifclear
6166@end ifset
6167
49fa1e15
AM
6168@ifset SPU
6169@ifclear GENERIC
6170@raisesections
6171@end ifclear
6172
6173@node SPU ELF
6174@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6175
6176@cindex SPU ELF options
6177@table @option
6178
6179@cindex SPU plugins
6180@kindex --plugin
6181@item --plugin
6182This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6183
6184@cindex SPU overlays
6185@kindex --no-overlays
6186@item --no-overlays
6187Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6188regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6189@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6190turns off all this special overlay handling.
6191
6192@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6193@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6194@item --emit-stub-syms
6195This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6196symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6197
6198@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6199@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6200@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6201This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6202function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6203on calls to non-overlay regions.
6204
6205@cindex SPU local store size
6206@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6207@item --local-store=lo:hi
6208@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6209the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6210range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6211
c0065db7 6212@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6213@kindex --stack-analysis
6214@item --stack-analysis
6215SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6216unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6217under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6218@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6219@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6220determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6221for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6222for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6223for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6224find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6225and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6226under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6227dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6228is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6229and calls will be given.
6230
c0065db7 6231@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6232@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6233@item --emit-stack-syms
6234This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6235in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6236These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6237functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6238functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6239such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6240The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6241@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6242@end table
6243
6244@ifclear GENERIC
6245@lowersections
6246@end ifclear
6247@end ifset
6248
36f63dca
NC
6249@ifset TICOFF
6250@ifclear GENERIC
6251@raisesections
6252@end ifclear
6253
6254@node TI COFF
6255@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6256@cindex TI COFF versions
6257@kindex --format=@var{version}
6258The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6259TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6260also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6261format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6262header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6263
6264@ifclear GENERIC
6265@lowersections
6266@end ifclear
6267@end ifset
6268
2ca22b03
NC
6269@ifset WIN32
6270@ifclear GENERIC
6271@raisesections
6272@end ifclear
6273
6274@node WIN32
6275@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6276
c0065db7 6277This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6278See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6279command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6280
6281@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6282@cindex import libraries
6283@item import libraries
69da35b5 6284The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6285libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6286regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6287archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6288support for creating such libraries provided with the
6289@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6290
c0065db7
RM
6291@item exporting DLL symbols
6292@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6293The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6294
6295@table @emph
6296@item using auto-export functionality
6297@cindex using auto-export functionality
6298By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6299which is controlled by the following command line options:
6300
0a5d968e
NC
6301@itemize
6302@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6303@item --exclude-symbols
6304@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6305@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6306@end itemize
6307
c0065db7 6308If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6309command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6310if either of the following are true:
6311
6312@itemize
6313@item A DEF file is used.
6314@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6315@end itemize
dc8465bf 6316
c0065db7
RM
6317@item using a DEF file
6318@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6319Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6320an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6321exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6322name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6323command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6324
6325@example
6326gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6327@end example
6328
0a5d968e
NC
6329Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6330@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6331
dc8465bf
NC
6332Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6333
6334@example
4b5bd4e7 6335LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6336
6337EXPORTS
6338foo
6339bar
6340_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6341another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6342var1 DATA
c0065db7 6343@end example
dc8465bf 6344
4b5bd4e7
DS
6345This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6346symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6347alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6348by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6349@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6350@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6351
6b31ad16
DS
6352The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6353name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6354the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6355
b45619c0
NC
6356When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6357library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6358@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6359executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6360
6361With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6362specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6363non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6364
6365If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6366or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6367filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6368
4b5bd4e7
DS
6369The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6370
6371@example
6372EXPORTS
6373 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6374 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6375 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6376@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6377
6378Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6379@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6380@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6381@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6382Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6383@samp{<integer>} alias.
6384
6385The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6386
6387@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6388will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6389by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6390linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6391library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6392
6393@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6394The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6395the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6396@code{*_imp__foo}).
6397
6398@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6399well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6400read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6401variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6402the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6403extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6404application will behave unexpectedly.
6405
6406@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6407it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6408symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6409API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6410the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6411
4b5bd4e7
DS
6412See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6413other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6414
6415@cindex creating a DEF file
6416While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6417with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6418
6419@item Using decorations
6420@cindex Using decorations
6421Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6422itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6423declared as:
6424
6425@example
6426__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6427__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6428@end example
6429
6430All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6431any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6432this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6433the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6434
6435Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6436decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6437instead:
6438
6439@example
6440__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6441__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6442@end example
6443
c0065db7
RM
6444This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6445when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6446variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6447code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6448of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6449omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6450@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6451information.
c0065db7 6452@end table
dc8465bf 6453
2ca22b03
NC
6454@cindex automatic data imports
6455@item automatic data imports
6456The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6457by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6458compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6459issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6460code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6461c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6462initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6463decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6464platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6465command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6466The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6467suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6468trigger the feature's use.
6469
c0065db7 6470auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6471additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6472
c0065db7 6473"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6474documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6475
c0065db7
RM
6476The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6477occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6478One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6479below.
6480
6481@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6482For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6483object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6484offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6485field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6486in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6487without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6488The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6489references.
6490
c0065db7
RM
6491The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6492be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6493themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6494runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6495compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6496support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6497run without error on an older system.
6498
c0065db7
RM
6499@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6500enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6501
6502@cindex direct linking to a dll
6503@item direct linking to a dll
6504The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6505including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6506libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6507traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6508libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6509function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6510though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6511storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6512tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6513large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6514
c0065db7 6515Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6516@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6517of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6518perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6519select the dll instead of an import library.
6520
2ca22b03 6521
69da35b5
NC
6522For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6523to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6524
6525@example
45e948fe
NC
6526libxxx.dll.a
6527xxx.dll.a
6528libxxx.a
6529xxx.lib
69da35b5 6530cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6531libxxx.dll
6532xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6533@end example
6534
69da35b5
NC
6535before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6536
c0065db7
RM
6537(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6538where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6539@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6540file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6541@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6542
c0065db7
RM
6543Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6544@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6545was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6546various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6547could coexist on the same machine.
6548
2ca22b03
NC
6549The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6550applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6551libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6552
6553@example
6554bin/
6555 cygxxx.dll
6556lib/
6557 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6558 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6559@end example
6560
c0065db7
RM
6561Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6562done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6563
65641. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6565@example
6566gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6567@end example
2ca22b03 6568
69da35b5
NC
6569However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6570(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6571@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6572not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6573
2ca22b03
NC
65742. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6575directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6576should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6577making the app/dll.
6578
6579@example
6580ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6581@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6582
6583Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6584
6585@example
6586gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6587@end example
69da35b5
NC
6588
6589This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6590perfectly legal
6591
6592@example
6593bin/
6594 cygxxx-5.dll
6595lib/
c0065db7 6596 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6597@end example
6598
dc8465bf 6599Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6600even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6601@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6602
6603Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6604wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6605
66061. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6607work with auto-imported data.
6608
dc8465bf
NC
66092. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6610import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6611symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6612for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6613possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6614
45e948fe
NC
66153. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6616critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6617in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6618stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6619
69da35b5 6620So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6621true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6622a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6623binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6624massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6625requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6626will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6627
c0065db7 6628@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6629@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6630@item adding additional names
6631Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6632A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6633exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6634when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6635import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6636
c0065db7 6637@example
dc8465bf
NC
6638LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6639
6640EXPORTS
c0065db7 6641foo
dc8465bf 6642_foo = foo
c0065db7 6643@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6644
6645The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6646
6647Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6648source code using the "weak" attribute:
6649
c0065db7
RM
6650@example
6651void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6652void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6653@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6654
6655See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6656symbols.
6657
6658@item renaming symbols
6659Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6660kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6661@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6662DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6663created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6664
c0065db7 6665@example
dc8465bf
NC
6666LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6667
6668EXPORTS
6669_foo = foo
c0065db7 6670@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6671
6672The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6673@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6674@end table
dc8465bf 6675
0a5d968e 6676Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6677unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6678If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6679@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6680that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6681@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6682renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6683to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6684the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6685In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6686which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6687
6688@cindex weak externals
6689@item weak externals
6690The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6691weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6692defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6693are three variants of weak externals:
6694@itemize
6695@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6696called lazy externals.
6697@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6698This form is not presently implemented.
6699@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6700implemented.
6701@end itemize
6702As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6703are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6704uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6705@end table
6706
6707@ifclear GENERIC
6708@lowersections
6709@end ifclear
6710@end ifset
6711
e0001a05
NC
6712@ifset XTENSA
6713@ifclear GENERIC
6714@raisesections
6715@end ifclear
6716
6717@node Xtensa
6718@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6719
6720@cindex Xtensa processors
6721The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6722@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6723specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6724keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6725example, with the command:
6726
6727@smallexample
6728SECTIONS
6729@{
6730 .text : @{
6731 *(.literal .text)
6732 @}
6733@}
6734@end smallexample
6735
6736@noindent
6737@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6738and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6739literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6740interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6741group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6742files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6743and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6744
43cd72b9 6745@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6746@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6747Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6748provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6749is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6750literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6751will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6752location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6753the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6754unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6755@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6756range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6757
6758For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6759to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6760instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6761instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6762instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6763@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6764hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6765By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6766switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6767density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6768instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6769performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6770linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6771a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6772
6773The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6774control the linker:
6775
6776@cindex Xtensa options
6777@table @option
e0001a05 6778@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6779@item --no-relax
6780Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6781by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6782relaxation.
6783
6784@item --size-opt
6785When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6786more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6787no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6788alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6789preserve the correctness of the code.
6790@end table
e0001a05
NC
6791
6792@ifclear GENERIC
6793@lowersections
6794@end ifclear
6795@end ifset
6796
252b5132
RH
6797@ifclear SingleFormat
6798@node BFD
6799@chapter BFD
6800
6801@cindex back end
6802@cindex object file management
6803@cindex object formats available
6804@kindex objdump -i
6805The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6806These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6807object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6808format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6809it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6810associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6811object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6812(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6813list all the formats available for your configuration.
6814
6815@cindex BFD requirements
6816@cindex requirements for BFD
6817As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6818several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6819BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6820formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6821been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6822BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6823may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6824
6825One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6826mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6827useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6828conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6829
6830@menu
6831* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6832@end menu
6833
6834@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6835@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6836@cindex opening object files
6837@include bfdsumm.texi
6838@end ifclear
6839
6840@node Reporting Bugs
6841@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6842@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6843@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6844
ff5dcc92 6845Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6846
6847Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6848it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6849to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6850work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6851@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6852
6853In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6854information that enables us to fix the bug.
6855
6856@menu
6857* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6858* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6859@end menu
6860
6861@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6862@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6863@cindex bug criteria
6864
6865If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6866
6867@itemize @bullet
6868@cindex fatal signal
6869@cindex linker crash
6870@cindex crash of linker
6871@item
6872If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6873@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6874
6875@cindex error on valid input
6876@item
ff5dcc92 6877If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6878
6879@cindex invalid input
6880@item
ff5dcc92 6881If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6882may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6883object files are correct.
6884
6885@item
6886If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6887improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6888@end itemize
6889
6890@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6891@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6892@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6893@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6894
6895A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6896products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6897recommend you contact that organization first.
6898
6899You can find contact information for many support companies and
6900individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6901distribution.
6902
ad22bfe8 6903@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6904Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6905@value{BUGURL}.
6906@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6907
6908The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6909@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6910fact or leave it out, state it!
6911
6912Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6913problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6914assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6915matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6916the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6917location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6918were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6919into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6920specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6921and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6922
6923Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6924the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6925on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6926
6927Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6928bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6929respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6930You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6931
6932To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6933
6934@itemize @bullet
6935@item
ff5dcc92 6936The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6937the @samp{--version} argument.
6938
6939Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6940the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6941
6942@item
ff5dcc92 6943Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6944patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6945
6946@item
6947The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6948version number.
6949
6950@item
ff5dcc92 6951What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6952``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6953
6954@item
6955The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6956observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6957list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6958sufficient.
6959
6960If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6961and then we might not encounter the bug.
6962
6963@item
6964A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6965bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6966provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6967bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6968state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6969requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6970we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6971attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6972
6973If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6974@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6975object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6976@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6977how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6978
6979@item
6980A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6981incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6982
ff5dcc92 6983Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6984will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6985not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6986a chance to make a mistake.
6987
6988Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6989say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6990copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6991C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6992and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6993fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6994you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6995any conclusion from our observations.
6996
6997@item
ff5dcc92 6998If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6999diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7000@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7001If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7002context, not by line number.
7003
7004The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7005sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7006@end itemize
7007
7008Here are some things that are not necessary:
7009
7010@itemize @bullet
7011@item
7012A description of the envelope of the bug.
7013
7014Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7015which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7016changes will not affect it.
7017
7018This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7019will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7020with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7021We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7022
7023Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7024of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7025output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7026less time, and so on.
7027
7028However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7029report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7030
7031@item
7032A patch for the bug.
7033
7034A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7035the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7036a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7037to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7038
ff5dcc92 7039Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7040construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7041through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7042able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7043fixed.
7044
7045And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7046patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7047help us to understand.
7048
7049@item
7050A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7051
7052Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7053things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7054@end itemize
7055
7056@node MRI
7057@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7058@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7059To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7060linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7061alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7062described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7063simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7064@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7065linker commands; these commands are described here.
7066
7067In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7068file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7069features to make use of them.
7070
7071You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7072@samp{-c} command-line option.
7073
7074Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7075command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7076blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7077MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7078issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7079
7080Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7081
7082You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7083lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7084The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7085
7086@table @code
7087@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7088@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7089@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7090Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7091the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7092@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7093your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7094script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7095commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7096input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7097@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7098
7099@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7100@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7101Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7102in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7103
7104@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7105
7106@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7107@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7108Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7109@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7110
7111@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7112@item BASE @var{expression}
7113Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7114absolute addresses) in the output file.
7115
7116@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7117@item CHIP @var{expression}
7118@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7119This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7120
7121@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7122@item END
7123This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7124
7125@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7126@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7127Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7128language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7129
7130@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7131@item
252b5132
RH
7132S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7133
7134@item
7135IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7136
7137@item
7138COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7139@samp{COFF}
7140@end enumerate
7141
7142@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7143@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7144Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7145@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7146
7147The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7148same line, with no change in its effect.
7149
7150@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7151@item LOAD @var{filename}
7152@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7153Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7154same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7155command line.
7156
7157@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7158@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7159@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7160MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7161option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7162
7163@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7164@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7165@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7166Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7167order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7168script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7169sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7170file, in the order specified.
7171
7172@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7173@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7174@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7175@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7176Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7177@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7178
7179@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7180@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7181@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7182@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7183You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7184specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7185If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7186@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7187@end table
7188
793c5807
NC
7189@node GNU Free Documentation License
7190@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7191@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7192
370b66a1
CD
7193@node LD Index
7194@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7195
7196@printindex cp
7197
7198@tex
7199% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7200% meantime:
7201\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7202\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7203\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7204\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7205\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7206\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7207\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7208\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7209\page\colophon
7210% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7211@end tex
7212
252b5132 7213@bye